JP6783810B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, one of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the change of the set value, and the suggestion of the set value is executed. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, there is a gaming machine in which a so-called latent probability change state, which is a high probability and low base state, is repeated (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-78670

However, when a game machine such as Patent Document 2 executes an effect suggesting a setting as in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the execution trigger of the effect suggesting the setting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the execution trigger of an effect suggesting a setting and improve the interest of the game.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) having different advantages for the player. ,
The setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-3) that suggests the set value to the player is provided.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot D) which is more disadvantageous than the first advantageous state.
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
As the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, which makes it easier to specify the set value than the first setting suggestion effect.
Ri executable der the second set indicated effect at a different rate as when controlled by the second advantageous as when controlled in the first preferred state (e.g., Fig. 21-4, Fig. 21-7 ),
The second setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate when the second advantageous state is continuous for the second number of times than when the second advantageous state is continuous for the first number of times.
It is characterized by that.
Further, as a conventional game machine, there is a game machine as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-101428, which displays a title for notifying the type of reach effect at the start of reach effect. In such a game machine, it is desired to further enhance the effect of production.
(1) In order to achieve the above objectives, game machines related to other aspects are
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect, and
In the plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executed in a common manner (for example, FIG. 9C).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
At a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach A or Super Reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, Super Reach D) as the suggestion effect.
And Super Reach E's reach production)
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the game machine of (4) above
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
The suggestion effect execution means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and
A specific display execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for performing a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means is further provided.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. It is possible and
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 17 (E) and 18 (I)).
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, the operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18J and 18K).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, the first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A). Etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (second size reach title image 31AK062 or the like displayed at the time of the reach title production shown in FIG. 19D) and a display means (for example, an image) that can be displayed. It is further equipped with a display device 5 and a CPU 120 for effect control).
The display means
Multiple types of elements having different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) It is possible to display a specific image (fruit pattern, etc. shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) composed of the above.
When either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (The shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D may be displayed so that the elements E1 to E5 are included in the display).
According to such a configuration, a specific image can be preferably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine with the frame for the game machine open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation processing and setting change processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial roll determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table before a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect determination processing during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect determination table, the accessory effect effect determination table, and the light guide plate effect determination table during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure for demonstrating the spec and the jackpot type table in each set value. It is a timing chart showing the flow of various productions. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting suggestion effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting suggestion effect processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting suggestion effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting suggestion effect processing.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and the gaming state after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (Detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 has various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects.
Numerical data indicating is counted up to date. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. RAM1 with backup flag off
If the backup data is not stored in 02 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead advance notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "loss". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super reach B <The order is higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8A and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8A shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively aroused and the effect of production is improved. In addition, the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (Semi-cursive, regular script, etc.) of the title characters may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. 9 and 10 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. .. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to enter the reach mode. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the entire screen of the image display device 5 is as shown in FIG. 9 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other as shown in FIG. 9 (E). The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B (here) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9 (F). Then, the characters "SP reach B") are displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is notified. To. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (G), the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, the titles of Super Reach A (Fig. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) In the introduction part until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made to have a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to identify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "defeat the enemy") from the speaker 8. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 9 (I) shows the same effect contents as those in FIG. 9 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. To.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title notification is performed (FIGS. 9 (D), (F), H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped to notify the title.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different as in this embodiment, or the display location may be different.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation degree suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 9H and the like, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, and corresponds to the expectation degree. The numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. The title display end timing may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of Super Reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (C), and the big hit combination is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (D). A fixed decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative pattern that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined production, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute the variable display, but during the reach effect. The way of displaying the decorative pattern of is arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays a hold display, an active display, a character that is residently displayed during variable display, and a display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of Super Reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to draw attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 11 (B) shows. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. You may do so. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 9H, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display the black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, and gradually. It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK0221. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white stars. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 12 (F), the black stars are highlighted as if they shine. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has been completed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Also, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes various and the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same image of the black star is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

12 (G) to 12 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is specified, FIG. 12 (G)
), The title 31AK023 of Super Reach D2 is displayed. At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12J and 12K, the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 12 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 12 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute the effect according to the player's preference and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, a button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13 (B). The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the character "SP reach C") is displayed, so that the super reach C is displayed. The title of reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to a title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 14B, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK030 changes to red is executed. In this way, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the advance notice effect or the development effect, which is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state and improves the degree of expectation. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Things that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of the change in the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined as one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or smaller than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16 (B) is used in the special mode. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's lines (for example, the display color of the lines) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. If the display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the timing of each change between the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is completed.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be executable. Further, although the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being decided by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 16, the decision ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the decision ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of feasible production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, a unified notice effect can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title and the dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or may be different from the title notice. The ratio of the dialogue notice and which production mode changes (the ratio of acting on which) may be different, or the ratio of changing to what color (how many stages) may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of any one of the title and the dialogue is obtained according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the effect content in the character movement and the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified, as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing so, the title and the expected degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expected degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Eliminate enemies with a stick controller", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a deciding effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the outcome of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is displayed according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

17 and 18 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after the image display device 5 is in the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character 31AK042 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to 17 (F) and 18 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 changes to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before the predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18 (K). , A display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 18 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect is improved and the player's expectation is increased. Can be maintained.

Although the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted in the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, they are appropriately performed in parallel with the reach effect and operation effect shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification example 2 of feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, the production of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach production is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the reliability of the jackpot when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 notifies the speaker 8 to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 emits the light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 19 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 19B, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 19 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 19D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is, for example, displayed small in the upper right corner of the screen and the character is displayed in the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the speaker 8 executes a notification to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 executes a notification to emit light. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19E is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 15 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of feature 112IW)
Next, the feature unit 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-1 and 20-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 112IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 112IW003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the game machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into the lock and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 112IW003 and the glass door frame. The 112IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 112IW201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, the setting key 112IW051 for switching to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state described later, and the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state are changed. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is housed in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 112IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 112IW051. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. Although the feature unit 112IW illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the substrate case 112IW201, a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the feature unit 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, a substrate including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The curity cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Further, the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the substrate case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. As a result, the right side portion of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, when the game machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the game machine frame 112IW003 from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating the pieces, the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the operation becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. While the state is maintained, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the two and the pachinko game machine 1. And the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may cause fraudulent acts such as changing the setting value. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A switches the setting with the setting key 112IW051. By maintaining the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is regulated, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the state of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

In the feature unit 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 and 20-5, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), and FIG. In addition to the display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C) and the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) and the loss shown in FIG. 20-6. A variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing values in the order of 1, 2 and 3 increasing the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3 the advantage increases stepwise.

(Display result judgment table)
20-4 (A) to 20-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result judgment table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of variable display.

As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In the case of, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case of "2" (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). To do.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to 20-4 (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to 20-4 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, for example, when applied to a game machine in which the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times (probability change end number) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state), the same probability change occurs. As for the number of ends, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3".

The feature unit 112IW provides a total of three set values, 1 to 3, as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature unit 112IW, the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), the determination values corresponding to the random numbers (MR2) for determining the jackpot type are assigned to each set value, but they are assigned to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C is determined for each set value is shown. The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-7, which will be described later, are also actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. To simplify, the percentage of assigned determination values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2", When the rate determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the rate determined for the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 20-5 (B). In the feature unit 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been done.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12, the start of the jackpot gaming state is started. This is the period during which the fanfare effect is executed as the effect effect to be notified.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the post-opening process of the jackpot in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and is next after the round of opening the jackpot on the effect control board 12 side is completed. This is the period during which the interval effect is executed as the effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period to be done.

As shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the jackpot type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determining the jackpot type A is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values "1"<"2"<"3".

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit increases in the order of "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". In the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ", the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period is also configured to be longer. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the game is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming too high.

This feature unit 112IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is performed during a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be enhanced. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot can be hit. When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot type A <B <C. As a result, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In the feature unit 112IW, in any of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are characterized by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 112IW). It ends when the figure game is executed or when the special figure game is entered into the jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time reduction control and the probability variation control is different for each jackpot type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the percentage of jackpots is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and the probability variation control, the number of controls, etc.) between the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, and the fanfare period and interval. The average period of the period and the ending period is configured to be different, but for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control, and the number of controls are different for each jackpot type, and the advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

It should be noted that the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, one of the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Included in determining by percentage.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured so that the period is different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in this feature unit 112IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the feature unit 112IW, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases, the jackpot type C as the jackpot type becomes easier to be determined, etc.). Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the ratio of the game ball passing through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the big hit type. When the property (so-called V probability variation type) is set and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the game ball is specially variable during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls a jackpot gaming state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability is higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3, but during the jackpot game. There may be a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

Further, in the case of changing the game playability according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is passed through the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to the probabilistic state or the jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result should be "big hit" and the fluctuation display result may be "missing". A loss fluctuation pattern determination table to be used when the determination is made in advance is prepared in advance.

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined time (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and the other period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use a different loss fluctuation pattern determination table.

Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 20-6 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined using the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the time when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) is set as a special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be set by using a real-time clock or the like as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). In addition, the period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period.

In the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and 20-6, normal reach loss and super reach loss are obtained in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, since the execution rate of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

Further, the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), and further, a set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motive for playing the game in the special period is Can be given and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern among them) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do so. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and 20-6 (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss, depending on the set value, when other than non-reach loss. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss increases remarkably in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" (this example). Then, it increases by 5%). Specifically, in the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), the normal reach loss is in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". The ratio of is slightly higher (in this example, it is increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In this feature unit 112IW, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this depends on the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss as a whole depending on the set value. This is a concept that includes that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that only normal reach loss has different execution ratios depending on the set value.

The feature unit 112IW displays a common background image in the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and 20-6 (B) is used. Then, the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image and displays the effect symbol in a variable manner. It should be noted that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game interest during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 112IW, and for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display mode of the effect symbol is different from the usual one and the set value is 1 or 2 (Selected only in) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured in. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 may include non-reach losses A to C, and any of non-reach losses A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss. It may be configured to determine the table.

As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". When the value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Judgment value is assigned to.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit increases in the order of "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time is different by changing the ratio of non-reach loss A to C having different fluctuation times depending on the set value. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. When multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the shaking display of the effect symbol and the time of the high-speed fluctuation display may be different for the effect, etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final effect symbol (final) is determined according to the set value. The period during which the stop symbol) is displayed as a stop may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the period during which the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of which of the non-reach loss A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration. Is fixedly set, and the fluctuation time may be longer when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set higher.

The feature portion 112IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening the variation time, which is shorter than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds), which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds), is provided. Then, this variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is the purpose. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than a predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the variation time may be different depending on the set value for the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this feature unit 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (large winning opening, second major winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform aggregation and calculate various winning information such as the continuous ratio, the winning ratio, and the base based on the aggregation.

Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 includes a 4-digit display unit. The display unit of each digit is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments drawing a "8" character and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments.

The display contents are displayed on the first-digit display unit and the second-digit display unit, and the numerical values are displayed as percentages on the third-digit display unit and the fourth-digit display unit. In the display No. 1, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the short-term combination ratio is displayed. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative total ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the first digit display unit and the second digit display unit, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit. When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. When is displayed, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the first digit display unit and the second digit display unit, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. Is displayed with "A7." On the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the total of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display unit and the fourth digit display unit.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the one digit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the eye display and the second digit display. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. When it is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit.

Further, the display of these short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, and the set values set at that time are obtained. It is possible to sequentially change the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2.

In the feature unit 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this and displays. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only a numerical value of 1 or only a numerical value of any 2 of these ratios, combination ratios, and bases.

In addition, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Good.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 20-8 and 20-9 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 112IW. In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the effect control means to start for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) starts when the power supply to the game machine is started. Set the timer (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation waiting timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the activation of the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 112IWS006 are executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processes are executed. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 clears, for example, a factory-factory setting flag indicating that the RAM 102 is still set at the factory-shipped (for example, this flag is cleared even if the RAM clearing processes 1 and 2 and the recovery processing described later are executed. (Cleared when the setting change process described later is executed) is set so that it is not set, and in step 112IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory default setting flag is set. do it. Not limited to such an embodiment, for example, a value indicating that the product is shipped from the factory (for example, "0" or "-") is set as a set value, and the value of the set value is set in step 112IWS006. May be checked to see if is still at the factory default. If the factory default settings are used (step 112 IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; Yes), that is, if the set value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112 IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. Whether or not it is determined (step 112 IWS008). In step 112 IWS008, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112 IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; No), that is, if a power failure occurs during the setting value change and the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 112IW029 to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating that a RAM error has occurred.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 112IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is cleared. Information is not cleared and is retained. Further, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS027.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is off (N in step 112IWS011), when the setting key 112IW051 is off (N in step 112IWS012), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 112IWS012). In step 112IWS013 N), the process does not shift to step 112IWS014, but shifts to loop processing.

When the processes of steps 112IWS006 to S014 are executed, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 112IW (N in steps 112IWS007 and S008), or the factory default settings are left (step 112IWS007, S008). In the case of 112IWS006 Y), if a power failure occurs during the setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 open. The RAM is cleared on the condition that the setting value can be changed after step 112IWS027. On the other hand, unless the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process start command indicating that the setting confirmation process is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation process start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112 IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as in step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process end command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS016) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S6. (Step 112IWS022) is performed to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 112IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 processing, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value among the storage areas of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the ratio and the combination ratio are cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared and are retained.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 112IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change processing start command indicating that the setting change processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting change processing start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

When the setting change process is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 112IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). Further, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS025) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S9. Therefore, an effect control command instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 20-10 (A) is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02, and the processes of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the game machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation error process (step 112IWSA04). Then, the process shifts to loop processing. In step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that a setting confirmation error occurs, and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the game machine. Further, in this example, when the setting confirmation error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process ends.

Next, the setting change process (step 112IWS029) will be described. FIG. 20-10 (B) is a flowchart showing a setting change process (step 112IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (Y in step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when "1" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to "2", and "2" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029. The display of the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to "3", and when "3" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to "1". Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates and stores the set value already stored) (step 112IWSB04).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSB05). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02, and the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the game machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes the setting change error processing (step 112IWSB07). Then, the process shifts to loop processing. In step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that a setting change error occurs, and the setting change error notification may be executed based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the game machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed. In this case, since the setting changing flag is still set in step 112IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y and 112IWS014 in step 112IWS009). The error state will be cleared.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

The specified set value may be displayed on the image display device 5 in step 112IWSA01 of the setting confirmation process. Further, in 112IWSB01 of the setting change process, the specified setting value may be displayed on the image display device 5. Then, the subsequent processing may be executed by using the image display device 5.

Further, during the execution of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process shown in FIGS. 20-10, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are not displayed during the normal game (for example, all the segments of the 7-segment LED are turned on or blinked). Aspect). By notifying the player using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation state or the setting change state is preferable. The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may be different in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

If the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change process shown in FIG. 20-10, the setting change process is executed again and the updated setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM). Unless the setting change is completed by, an error may occur. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, the setting change flag (which is not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM as the backup RAM that stores the setting value, and the setting change is performed at the end of the setting change process. If the flag is turned off and the setting change flag is turned on when executing a process other than the setting change process (for example, the game control main process), an error occurs. As described above, in a situation where the setting change process does not proceed normally in the middle, the clerk of the amusement park may mistakenly think that the setting change has been completed even though it has not been completed. In such a case, it is possible to guarantee the reliable completion of the setting change by setting an error if the setting change is not completed.

Further, in step 112IWSA01 and step 112IWSB01 of FIG. 20-10, the current set value is read from the backup RAM and the set value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not performed normally, the image display device 5 is displayed with information indicating that an error occurs, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are displayed in a mode different from that during the normal game. (For example, if all the segments of the 7-segment LED are turned off, or if all the lights are turned on during the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, all the blinking may occur).

FIG. 20-11 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 20-11, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (step 112IWS005-S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS015-S017) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. Will be executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (A) and 20-12 (B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. If the big winning opening is being opened during a big hit game or the like at the timing when the power is turned off, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), the CPU 103 each time it detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (E), the CPU 103 sets the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like. Store (update storage) in the backup area of. At this time, the CPU 103 tells the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative continuous ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio of the set values set at that time. Display base 1 and base 2. When the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big prize opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-12 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory of the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a state in which the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (F), the CPU 103 displays "EE" on the display monitor 112IW029 based on the occurrence of an error in the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored. It is possible to make it.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. As the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 112IW) or the most advantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in the case of this feature unit 112IW) may be displayed.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 20-13 and 20-14 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved storage number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 112IWS101). For example, check the count value of the total pending storage counter for counting the total pending storage.

If the total number of pending storage is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storage is 0 (step 112IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed on the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed on the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 112 IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 112IWS104).

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS102 to S104, in the feature unit 112IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 112IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total reserved storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 112IWS107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112 IWS108). As described above, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed at the time of turning on the power by executing the process of step 112IWS011, but even after the power is turned on, the step The setting value command is transmitted every time the variation display is started by executing the process of 112IWS108.

Even if the same fluctuation pattern is used, if different fluctuation pattern commands are sent for each set value, the total number of fluctuation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example) of fluctuation pattern commands are required. Therefore, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, even if the set value command is transmitted only when a specific fluctuation pattern is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern is provided with the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the set value. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of the set value. May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 112IWS011) transmitted at the time of turning on the power and the setting value command (see step 112IWS108) transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown. It is not limited to any mode. For example, even if the setting value command for power-on and the setting value command for fluctuation start are configured as separate commands, different setting value commands are sent at power-on and fluctuation start. Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command is shown at the start of fluctuation, but the effect control command that is used as both the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command is transmitted. May be good. In this case, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern command specifies the same fluctuation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 side is configured to output which set value. It may be configured so that which fluctuation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. The variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate if the setting value is 3. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured so that the fluctuation time is the same, but the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command is not normally received, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not normally received, the dedicated selection ratio is selected. It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current gaming state (step 112IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 controls to send a probability change state background specification command in the case of a probability change state, and controls to transmit a time reduction state background specification command in the case of a time reduction state, which is a normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background specification command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 20-4) with a random number value MR1 and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step 112IWS110), the process proceeds to step 112IWS116.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 20-5) to correspond to a type corresponding to a value matching the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "Big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 112IWS114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS115). For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the jackpot flag is set, "7", which is the jackpot symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, it may be determined to be a stop symbol of a different special symbol depending on the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

(Production mode change process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the feature unit 112IW will be described. FIG. 20-15 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main process in the feature unit 112IW. In the feature unit 112IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control random number update process of step S77 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change process (step 112IWS201) to change the effect mode, and then executes the effect mode change process. The process returns to step S73.

The feature unit 112IW can control three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the advance notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process of step 112 IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 controls to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect mode may be changed based on the predetermined date and time based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 112 IWS201, when the effect mode is changed, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, set a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change and reset the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change. For example, when the effect mode A is changed, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to B, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to C, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The production mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A → ... It may be changed at random from modes A to C.

(Command analysis processing)

FIG. 20-16 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 112IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 112IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 112IWS303). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 112IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 112IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power is turned on to the game machine (step 112IWS306).

In the feature unit 112IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power supply, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area supply power to the game machine. Is cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the game machine is started, no set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, and the process is started with the set value command reception flag cleared. To. Since the effect control board 12 is started in a state where the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting confirmation process or the recovery process is executed. It may be configured so that the set value command is always sent when the power is turned on.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the game machine and the setting change process is performed, but the set value command is normally performed due to missing command or garbled data. If the data cannot be received in, the process of step 112IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature unit 112IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each fluctuation display, so that the process of step 112IWS305 is performed based on the set value command received thereafter. It is executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Further, even if the setting value command is received, the setting value included in the setting value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when reading the setting value command on the effect control CPU 120 side, the setting value command is used. It may be configured to determine whether or not the included set value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the set value is configured to be set to any of "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. If this is the case, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 side stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and then when a new set value command is received, the newly received set value command is used. If the set value shown does not match the set value stored last time, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and it may be determined that the setting value is abnormal. Then, even if it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been received normally, and the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown by the feature unit 112IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial roll setting)
When the effect control board 12 side receives any of the initialization designation command, the recovery command, the setting change processing end command, and the setting confirmation processing end command from the main board 11 in the command analysis process, the feature unit 112IW receives. , The image display device 5 controls to display a predetermined initial result (specifically, a combination of effect symbols displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started). Perform (hereinafter, also referred to as initial roll production).

If the received effect control command is a setting change process end command (step 112IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the set value command is received normally), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, the initial roll determination table is used to use a combination of even initial rolls (for example, "246" and "224"), which is a combination of even numbered effect symbols, and an odd number of effect symbols. It is determined to be one of an odd initial number (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial number which is a combination of a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 112IWS309). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

FIG. 20-17 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table. In step 112IWS309, a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the set value stored in the set value storage area using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 20-17 (A), and the initial result is performed. Determine the outcome. In the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 20-17 (A), the ratio of odd initial rolls determined increases in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Therefore, if the odd initial roll is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, the setting value is advantageous as compared with the case where the setting is changed and the even initial roll is displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-17 (A), the special initial result may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game and to give a motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112 IWS310). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 20-17 (A) assuming that the set value is "1" (step 112IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

By executing the process of steps 112IWS310 to S311, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. The initial roll is determined as being "1". As shown in FIG. 20-17 (A), with respect to the set value "1", the ratio of determining the odd initial roll is the lowest, and the special initial roll is not determined. By configuring in such a way, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

FIG. 20-17 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-17 (B), in the initial roll determination table for the effect mode C, an odd initial roll is determined as compared with the case of the setting value "3" which is the most advantageous for the player. The ratio is low, and it may not be determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS312 to S313, the feature unit 112IW sets a disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the odd initial rolls and special initial rolls are displayed to reduce the situation in which the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial rolls determined in steps 112IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 112IWS314).

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result to be an even initial number, and the image display device 5 In, control is performed to display even initial rolls (step 112IWS315).

By executing the process of step 112IWS315, the feature unit 112IW uniformly displays an even initial number when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd-numbered initial roll symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, an initial roll is used by using a table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial roll symbol is set lower than the set value "1" of the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

In this example, the case where the even initial number is uniformly displayed when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set, and the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of "???" symbols as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a set value in some form may be displayed as an initial result.

In addition, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 112IWS308, the set value "1" may be stored in the set value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial result. May be good.

If the received effect control command is either an initialization specification command, a recovery command, or a setting confirmation process end command (step 112IWS316), that is, if the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 , The initial roll is determined to be an even initial roll, and the image display device 5 controls to display the even initial roll (step 112IWS317). In the feature unit 112IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial roll is determined as the even initial roll and is not determined as the odd initial roll, but the even initial roll is determined by lottery. It may be determined as either an eye or an odd initial result. In this case, the determined ratio may be different depending on the set value.

If the received effect control command is a RAM error notification command (step 112IWS318), the effect control CPU 120 executes RAM error notification (step 112IWS319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as "a RAM error error has occurred" in the image display device 5, or outputs a sound or an error sound indicating a RAM error error from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality notification is performed, the maximum volume sound or error sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and LED are emitted with the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED). It is desirable to make it emit light in white.

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 112IWS320). For example, if the received effect control command is a variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is stored in the variation pattern command storage area provided in the RAM 122, and the variation pattern command reception flag is set. Further, for example, if the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area provided in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS301.

Note that the feature unit 112IW is configured so that the odd initial roll is not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, but even if the odd initial roll can be displayed. Good. Further, also in this case, the ratio determined by the odd initial number may be different depending on the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Further, for example, in place of or in addition to the odd initial roll and the even initial roll, an initial roll that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied and is set. (It is determined that the value is 2 or the set value 3), an initial result that is determined to be a specific set value, or the like may be provided so that the value is displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied when the specific initial result is displayed by preventing the determination of the specific initial result, and the set value 2 or It will be confirmed that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting a specific initial roll to be determined only in the case of the set value 3, it is confirmed that the set value is 3 when the specific initial roll is displayed. .. Further, at the time of determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the determined ratio may be different depending on the set value.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the feature unit 112IW, the set value can be changed, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and the game (for example, during the game). , The suggestion effect during the game executed during the change display of the effect symbol, the setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern, and the suggestion effect during the big hit executed during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game) can be executed. Has been done. In the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes in which the reliability of the suggestion is different. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect, or in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of suggestion effect during game> suggestion effect during big hit> suggestion effect during pre-game, or suggestion effect during jackpot> suggestion effect during game> suggestion effect during pre-game. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be set to be set. For example, the administrator of the game machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the initial appearance effect suggesting that the setting has been changed), or the execution ratio. It may be possible to change the setting so as to lower (or raise). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operation means such as the push button 31B or the operation means (operable only by the administrator) such as the switch provided inside the game machine. May be changed.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 20-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 is set with a variable start command reception flag (for example, a variable pattern command reception flag) indicating that a command or the like for designating the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Whether or not it is confirmed (step 112 IWS401).

When the variation start command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the effect waiting demo effect if it is being executed (step 112IWS402, step 112IWS403). Then, the variable start command reception flag is reset (step 112IWS404), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 112IWS405), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

If the fluctuation start command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (N in step 112IWS406). (Step 112 IWS407). In step 112IWS407, for example, when the timer set when the previous variable display (display result "loss") ends (for example, set in 30 seconds) times out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, when the fluctuation display is not executed even once after the power is turned on and before the start of the game), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, when the variable display is not executed and a predetermined period elapses (and the jackpot game state is not controlled), or when the game is not started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demo effect is produced by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the timing result by the timing means matches a predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 112IWS408). That is, in step 112IWS408, it is confirmed whether the game has not started yet.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112 IWS409). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed (step 112IWS).
410). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demo effect is controlled and includes the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the including aspect is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

FIG. 20-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 112 IWS410, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A). Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the mode of the effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 20-19 (A), judgment values are assigned so that the ratio of pre-game suggestion effects executed increases in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Has been done. Further, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" in which the second effect mode is determined increases. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that the pre-game suggestion effect is set to an advantageous set value by being executed by the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the set value is "3".

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112 IWS411). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value is "1", and whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A). And the production mode is determined (step 112 IWS412). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS411 to S412, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the mode of the effect are determined as "1". As shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode is the lowest, and the third effect mode may not be determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest in games.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112 IWS413). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS414). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

FIG. 20-19 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed as compared with the case of the set values "2" and "3". The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS413 to S414, the feature unit 112IW sets a disadvantageous set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player on the contrary is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect in the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 112IWS410, S421, and S414 (step 112IWS415). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 112IWS416 as it is. That is, in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 112IWS413, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and is in the effect mode B. It is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution rate of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), before the game is played. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed so that the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. It may be.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1, is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the pre-game suggestion effect is not executed when the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not yet been received. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executed even when the setting has not been changed. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed at different ratios depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 20-19 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change is made. When it is not performed, the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the setting is changed, and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is also smaller. By doing so, it is possible to make the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect different between when the setting is changed and when it is not changed.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect in the mode including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 112IWS416). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

When the process of step 112 IWS416 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, the execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect or jackpot suggestion effect), the execution content (execution mode), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 112IWS416 is executed, the customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions and the execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial roll effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect, etc.) are shown. The information may be stored, and the effect of estimating the set value from the information and notifying the setting value may be executed. It should be noted that this effect notifies the setting expectation degree (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 112IWS408 to 112IWS415. Further, the process of step 112IWS416 shows the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect during the customer waiting demo effect, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the pachinko game machine 1 interested in the state before the start of the game and to give the motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, which can enhance the interest. .. Not limited to the example of the feature unit 112IW, for example, a real-time clock or the like is used so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). May be good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include the information regarding the suggestion effect during the game in the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game. It may be configured to do so. Further, when the player takes a picture of the two-dimensional code displayed on the game machine using a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege may be performed according to the game history. Further, the player may access the Web server (or analyze the two-dimensional code) using the mobile terminal to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may use the mobile terminal to read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information so that the setting suggestion image suggesting the setting value is displayed on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined standard is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. You may.

(Suggestion production decision processing during the game)
FIG. 20-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the suggestion effect determination process during the game. The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the special period (Y in step 112IWS501), it selects the first in-game suggestion effect determination table (step 112IWS502) and is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 112IWS501), the suggestion effect determination table during the second game is selected (step 112IWS503). For example, when a setting change end command or a setting value command is received, a special period flag is set, and when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 112IWS501 whether or not the special period is in progress.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS504). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed (step 112IWS505).

FIG. 20-21 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 20-21 (B) is a second in-game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

Further, regarding the second production mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the first production mode (appearance of mini character A). Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in execution ratio between the set values is larger than that. That is, there is a high degree of reliability that the second effect mode is set to a set value that is more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and 20-21 (B), the highly reliable in-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and 20-21 (B), the third value is obtained only when the set value is "3".
It may be determined by the production mode (character C appearance). Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the game according to the third effect mode.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112IWS506). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". Step 112 IWS507).

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS506 to S507, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and 20-21 (B), with respect to the set value "1", the ratio of determining that the suggestion effect is executed during the game is low, and the ratio determined as the second effect mode is low. Is the lowest and may not be determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest in games.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS508). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS509).

FIG. 20-21 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-21 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value "3". , It may not be determined as the third production mode.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS508 to S509, the feature unit 112IW sets a disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player on the contrary is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect is not executed during the game.

By executing the process of step 112IWS508, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect is executed during the game and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the game may be made executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the in-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and 20-21 (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game.

Not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and 20-21 (B), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1, is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In this feature unit 112IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect during the game at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the suggestion effect during the game (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that the feature unit 112IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during the game in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. , It may be possible to execute a suggestion effect during the game in a different mode. For example, the size, color, and the like of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

Further, the feature unit 112IW is configured so that whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed are different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern, the presence / absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect, the type of pseudo-continuous effect, and the display result are big hits. Depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game, the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed may be different.

For example, the suggestion effect during the game may be executed only when the variation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the super reach B and the fluctuation pattern including the super reach A having a higher expectation than the super reach B, the latter is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. Or, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed is high, and the reliability when the suggestion effect is executed is high. It may be made higher.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the pseudo-ream effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-ream effect (or the number of pseudo-reams is smaller than that of the former), the former has a higher ratio of the suggestion effect being executed during the game. It may be set to be high, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, or the rate when the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high and when it is executed. The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of the suggestion effect being executed during the game. The reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high, or the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed may be high, and the reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high. ..

(Production decision processing during big hit)
FIG. 20-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during the big hit. The big hit middle effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit middle effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS601). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Whether or not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit, and the effect mode when executing it are determined (step 112IWS602). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

In step S112IWS602, when the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the number shown in FIG. 20-23 (A). One jackpot suggestion effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during a specific period, the second jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table and the set value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous consecutive villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or it may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as a specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as a specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st variation after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a jackpot suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the jackpot suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

In the first and second jackpot suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, regarding the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the execution ratio between the set values is high between the specific period and the non-specific period. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference between them becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the jackpot suggestion effect with higher reliability than in the non-specific period is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a specific period, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the jackpot suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and 20-23 (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed by the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (A1), the effect symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 112IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (A1), after the effect symbol that becomes the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, the figure is shown. As shown in 20-25 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 112IW105 is displayed.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112IWS603). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1" (. Step 112 IWS 604). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS603 to S604, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and 20-23 (B), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, the player is disappointed by the big hit suggestion effect being executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is played and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS605). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS606). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

FIG. 20-23 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-23 (C), in the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining that the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed is low, and the set values are “2” and “3”. Compared with the above, the ratio of the second effect mode and the third effect mode is determined to be lower, and the fourth effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS605 to S606, the feature unit 112IW sets a disadvantageous set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player, and to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 112IWS607 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

By executing the process of step 112IWS605, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the jackpot when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. Even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the jackpot suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and 20-23 (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and 20-23 (B), only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. You may. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be different depending on the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-23 (B), regardless of the set value, the rate at which the suggestion effect during the big hit is not executed is configured to be the same, but if the rate at which the suggestion effect is not executed differs depending on the set value. You may let it.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image suggesting a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect reaches the predetermined number of times, or when a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

In this feature unit 112IW, it is possible to execute the jackpot suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the jackpot suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including the effect mode and the fourth effect mode) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode are different depending on the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 112IWS607).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 112IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (B2), the movable member 112IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 20-24 (A1) and 20-24 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 112IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 is affected by the big hit suggestion effect. The position where the dialogue image is displayed becomes difficult to see. In the feature unit 112IW, since the suggestion effect during the jackpot and the accessory effect are executed at different timings of the fanfare period in the jackpot game, the movable member 112IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is the jackpot. It does not obscure the dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect. However, if the movable member 112IW101 is operated by the accessory effect during the fanfare period, the player may pay attention to the movable member 112IW101 and overlook the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect. Therefore, in step 112IWS607, by using the accessory effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (D), the accessory effect is not executed when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and degrading the interest. Further, with such a configuration, even if the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion effect is performed. (Performed during the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when it is decided to execute the big hit suggestion effect, the operation mode of the movable member 112IW101 is changed (for example, controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping with the dialogue image by the big hit suggestion effect), or the big hit. The display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is decided, the execution of the accessory effect may be restricted by lowering the execution rate of the accessory effect. In addition, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 20-23 (D), when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 112IWS609) when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 112IWS608).

Here, a light guide plate 112IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light and a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end face of the light guide plate are provided on the front surface of the image display device 5, and the light guide plate 112IW103 is provided. It is assumed that the light emitting body is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 112IW103 from the end surface of the light guide plate 112IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the game machine. Then, by making the light emitting body emit light, it is possible to execute the light guide plate effect of emitting light from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the game machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the game machine, resulting in a “big hit”. Appears. Further, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5 while the light guide plate effect is being executed.

In step 112IWS609, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (E), depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when it is executed.
The light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios. Specifically, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the rate at which the light guide plate effect is executed is low. That is, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous set value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to see. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 112IW104 is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. If this is done, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the dialogue A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest of the game due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is not desirable for the player. When the jackpot suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion production during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

In the feature unit 112IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the jackpot suggestion effect (or pre-game suggestion effect or in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, the occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. Further, when a predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect having a specific effect mode) that can be executed at the same time as the jackpot suggestion effect is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect. May give priority to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect, it is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect. The image may be displayed preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the effect symbol is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the effect symbol arranged on the surface. It may be applied (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum type game machine). Alternatively, the effect symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having the effect symbol arranged on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type game machine, at the start of the first fluctuation after changing the setting, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation (or characteristic) different from the normal operation. Operation may occur). Therefore, in the initial fluctuation after the setting change, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the rate of execution may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Further, in this case as well, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when an undesired suggestion is given to the player. For example, when an even initial number is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. It is also possible to increase the ratio of executing the even-numbered effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate. In addition, the control that outputs a predetermined sound, the movable member, and the stick controller 3 are not limited to the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect.
By performing effects including control to vibrate 1A and control to make decorative light emitters such as decorative LEDs emit light in a predetermined manner, the player's attention is directed to others, and the initial appearance effect, pre-game suggestion effect, and game are performed. The visibility of the medium suggestion effect may be reduced (or made difficult to notice).

Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 112IW, a simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set at the time of turning on the power or the real-time clock) is executed in a specific mode. May suggest the setting.

In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) suggesting a setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold memory becoming 0 or the number of times a start prize that exceeds the upper limit hold memory number occurs. Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Further, based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in the predetermined operation valid period, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting (for example, the display control of the predetermined image, the output control of the predetermined sound, the predetermined sound). (Controlling the light emission of the lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Although the feature portion 112IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

As described above, the feature unit 112IW includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and control of an advantageous state can be executed based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting In a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWS005-S010 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. Steps 112 IWS409-S415, S50 in CPU 120
4 to S509, S601 to S606)
The suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal. As such, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a portion that executes steps 112IWS421, S507, S604).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, in a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 112IWS011 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing, so that the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. It is provided with suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion that executes steps 112 IWS410, S421, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606 in the effect control CPU 120).
The suggestion effect determining means
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Step 112 IWS410, S505, S602 is executed based on the set value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined by using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value "1") (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 112IWS421, S507, and S604 based on the set value "1")
It is described that the data capacity may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in the data capacity can be prevented.

In the feature unit 112IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect" is a concept including determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. is there.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game is started from an early time zone. It can give motivation to do it and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), 20-21 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-21 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 8 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-23 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 9 of the first invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use accessory effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the first invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 11 of the first invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and control of an advantageous state can be executed based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting In a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention that solves the problem.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWS005-S010 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set to N, S508 in step 112IWS413. When N is N in N, S605, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, in a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 112IWS011 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing, so that the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game is started from an early time zone. It can give motivation to do it and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), 20-21 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-21 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-23 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use accessory effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the second invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the second invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and control of an advantageous state can be executed based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting In a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWS005-S010 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
The suggestion effect execution means
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects.
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 112IWS414, S509, and S606, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, in a game machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 112IWS011 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing, so that the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. It is provided with suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion that executes steps 112 IWS410, S421, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606 in the effect control CPU 120).
The suggestion effect determining means
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Step 112 IWS410, S505, S602 is executed based on the set value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the dedicated decision data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table) is used. The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table in step 112IWS414. , S509, S606)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game is started from an early time zone. It can give motivation to do it and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), 20-21 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-21 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-23 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the third invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use accessory effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the third invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the third invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

In addition, this feature unit 112IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when it is controlled to the effect mode A, if the set value information is not input normally, It is configured so that the suggestion effect can be executed as if it is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player (the configuration of the first invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode B, the set value. If the information is not input normally, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the configuration of the second invention described above), and if it is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is input normally. If this is not the case, the case where the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect is executably configured as the suggestive effect (the configuration of the third invention described above) is shown. Not limited. For example, it is possible to switch which of the above-mentioned first invention to third invention control method is used to execute the suggestion effect according to the gaming state. In this case, for example, when the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect assuming that the set value is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player. The configuration (the configuration of the above-mentioned first invention) is configured so that if the gaming state is a time-saving state, the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted when the set value information is not input normally (the above-mentioned second invention). (Structure) If the game state is a probabilistic state, if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (configuration). The configuration of the third invention described above) may be performed.

Further, it is not necessary to make the suggestion effect executable by all the control methods of the first to third inventions shown above, and the suggestive effect is made executable by using only one of the control methods. May be good.

In addition, the feature unit 112IW controls the execution of the suggestion effect by the control methods of the first to third inventions described above when the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as omission or garbled data (suggestion). Although the case (restricting the production) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the set value command is received but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestion effect may be restricted. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received by the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is received. If the set value indicated by the set value command received in is not the same as the set value stored last time, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control methods of the first to third inventions described above. It may be controlled (restricting the suggestion effect).

Further, the method of differentiating the games in each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in the case of odd-numbered setting values such as the set values "1" and "3", consecutive villas (that big hits occur continuously during a probable change state) are likely to occur and consecutive villas occur. It is configured so that there is a large difference from when it is difficult, and in the case of an even number setting value such as the setting value "2", the setting value is configured so that the likelihood of occurrence of consecutive villas is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be feasible. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control methods of the first to third inventions described above. It may be configured to do (restrict the suggestion effect).

The feature portion 112IW also includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-201002, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from when the set value is changed until the first variable display is executed, at a different ratio depending on the set value. A game machine that is characterized by being able to execute (such as or initial roll production) is described. According to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game and plays the game from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to do the game and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of variable display of production identification information (for example, production design).
In the suggestion effect executing means, different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value in the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display (for example, the suggestion effect (for example). It is stated that the odd-numbered initial roll display) may be made feasible, and according to such a configuration, the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the game machine is restored after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 20). -19 As shown in (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value after the variable display is started.
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the suggested set value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. X, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 have a problem that they cannot effectively motivate them to play games and cannot sufficiently enhance their interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), 20-21 (A), (B)).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed (for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), B)),
It is described that the variable display executing means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to this structure, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times of execution of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect reaches the predetermined number, and a specific super reach effect. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect based on (for example, that the advance notice effect has been executed) (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed). See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display the set set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, a portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestive effect executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-21 (A), (B), etc.).
A gaming machine is described that further includes a notification means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect. According to this feature. , It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestion effect has been executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify information about the executed suggestion effect while waiting for a customer for which the variable display is not executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
An information generation means for generating information (for example, execution history information) regarding the executed suggestion effect, and
An image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) in which the information can be read by an imaging device, and
It is described that the specific image may be provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image pickup device. According to such a configuration, a game entertainment interest is provided. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display the set set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, a portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize due to other effects, the interest may be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided with a limiting means (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. FIG. 20-23. (D)
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
When the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect overlap, the limiting means changes at least one of the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, one of them is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending). Change to run during the period)
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is prohibited. See FIG. 20-23 (D). )
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 112IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the usual one (for example, suggestion during a big hit). Control so that it does not stop at a position that overlaps with the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
Both the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include a display in one display means (for example, the image display device 5).
It is described that the above-mentioned one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect with priority over the display related to the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. it can.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display the set set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, a portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that the execution of the setting suggestion effect, which is unfavorable for the player, may reduce the interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set setting value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. A game machine that is characterized by having more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.) is described, and according to these features, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, an accessory effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 112IW101), and according to such a configuration, The effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A light guide plate having translucency capable of transmitting light (for example, a light guide plate 112IW103) and
It is provided with a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end surface of the light guide plate.
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitting body and emits it to the front surface of the game machine.
The predetermined notification means is capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. It is also described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means includes the first setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. See FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)), which suggests that the setting is set to the first set value. , A second setting suggestion suggesting that the second set value is set to a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value (for example, a jackpot suggestion effect of the third effect mode. FIG. 20-23 ( A) and (see (B)) can be executed,
When the first setting suggestion is executed, the predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIG. 20-23 (E)).
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the eighth invention,
It is provided with a setting suggestion setting means that can set the execution ratio of the setting suggestion (for example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the operation means such as the push button 31B and the operation means (management) such as the switch provided inside the game machine. It is possible to change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect by operating)
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the eighth invention,
It is a game machine that displays variable identification information.
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed.
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed. According to such a configuration, it is interesting. Can be prevented from decreasing.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 8 of the eighth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display the set set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, a portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the ninth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
It is a game machine that can play games using the game value,
A game value giving means that gives a game value based on the establishment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value giving means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 20-5 (A) and 20-5 (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the ninth invention,
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means makes it possible to execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state regardless of a set value. It is described that it may be possible, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 8 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be predetermined according to the set value, and such a configuration makes the gambling too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 9 of the ninth invention,
It is a game machine that can control multiple types of advantageous states.
The game control means can control one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the ninth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display the set set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, a portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention to solve the problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
A game machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different depending on the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
It is a game machine that can play games using the game value,
A game value giving means that gives a game value based on the establishment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value giving means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period for the variable display is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be predetermined according to the set value, and such a configuration makes the gambling too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the tenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display the set set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, a portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the configuration shown by the feature unit 112IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by other feature units such as the feature unit 31AK to configure the game machine. For example, when the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect shown by the feature unit 112IW are executed, a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect. Occasionally, the title corresponding to the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect may be notified in the same manner as the feature unit 31AK.

(Explanation of feature section 251F to feature section 253F)
Next, the feature unit 251F to the feature unit 253F will be described. The feature unit 251F has a feature regarding the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the jackpot type B described later, and the feature unit 252F and the feature unit 253F each have a feature regarding the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the jackpot type D described later.

(About specs)
FIG. 21-1 is a diagram for explaining specifications and a jackpot type table for each set value. FIG. 21-1 (A) is a table showing specifications at each set value, FIG. 21-1 (B) is a first special symbol jackpot type table A used in the feature unit 251F, and FIG. 21-1 (C) is a table. The first special symbol jackpot type table B used in the feature units 252F and 253F, FIG. 21-1 (C) is a diagram showing the second special symbol jackpot type table used in the feature units 251F to the feature unit 253F.

Here, in the feature section 251F to the feature section 253F, the first start winning opening is provided on the path through which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the left side of the game area of the game board 2 (left hit). The second start winning opening is provided on the path through which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area of the game board 2 (right-handed). Further, in the feature section 251F to the feature section 253F, a left-handed hit is made aiming at the first start winning opening for starting the game of the first special symbol at the time of low base, and the game of the second special symbol is started at the time of high base. It is a game of right-handed aiming at the second start winning opening for this purpose.

For such playability, the table shown in FIG. 21-1 (B) is used when hitting left, and the table shown in FIG. 21-1 (D) is used when hitting right. As for the feature portions 252F and 253F, the table shown in FIG. 21-1 (C) is used when hitting left, and the table shown in FIG. 21-1 (D) is used when hitting right. The specifications for each set value in the feature unit 251F to the feature unit 253F are common. Details of each table will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 21-1 (A), in setting 1, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change is 1/319, the jackpot probability at the time of probability change is 1/95, and the ST continuation rate is 65.29%. In setting 2, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change is 1/280, the jackpot probability at the time of probability change is 1/75, and the ST continuation rate is 73.87%. In setting 3, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change is 1/250, the jackpot probability at the time of probability change is 1/60, and the ST continuation rate is 81.37%. Here, the ST continuation rate indicates the probability that the ST state will continue. The ST state is a state in which the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game state and the probability change state continues until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed. In the feature section 251F to the feature section 253F, ST continues 100 times after the big hit game state.

Due to the setting of the data shown in FIG. 21-1 (A), in the case of setting 1, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change, the jackpot probability at the time of probability change, and the ST continuation rate are all the lowest among the set values. There is. On the other hand, in the case of setting 3, all of the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change, the jackpot probability at the time of probability change, and the ST continuation rate are the highest among the set values. Therefore, the relationship of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 is advantageous to the player. The set value may be further provided with a plurality of stages, and may be provided, for example, in stages 1 to 6 so as to be advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 21-1 (B), the first special symbol jackpot type table A used in the feature unit 251F includes three jackpots of jackpot type A, jackpot type B, and jackpot type C. When a big hit is made by the first special symbol, it is determined using this table that one of these three big hits will be a big hit.

In the jackpot type A, the fluctuation based on the game state after the jackpot continues for 100 variable displays, and the determination rate is 45%. In the jackpot type B, the game state after the jackpot is based on high accuracy and high accuracy. In the jackpot B, the number of times the high base is set differs depending on the game state before the jackpot. Specifically, when the jackpot B is changed from the low accuracy low base or the high accuracy low base, the high accuracy high base continues 50 times, and then the high accuracy low base continues 50 times. When the jackpot B is changed from the high accuracy high base, the high accuracy high base continues 100 times. The determination rate of the jackpot B is 20%. Further, in the jackpot type C, the fluctuation based on the low accuracy and high level of the game state after the jackpot continues 100 times, and the determination rate is 35%. It can be said that the ST state is after the end of the jackpot A and the jackpot B in which the high probability continues a predetermined number of times.

As shown in FIG. 21-1 (C), the first special symbol jackpot type table B used in the feature units 252F and 253F includes three jackpots of jackpot type A, jackpot type D, and jackpot type C. When a big hit is made by the first special symbol, it is determined using this table that one of these three big hits will be a big hit.

In the jackpot type A, the fluctuation based on the game state after the jackpot continues for 100 variable displays, and the determination rate is 45%. Further, in the jackpot type D, the fluctuation based on the high accuracy and low base of the game state after the jackpot continues 100 times, and the determination rate is 20%. Further, in the jackpot type C, the fluctuation based on the low accuracy and high level of the game state after the jackpot continues 100 times, and the determination rate is 35%. It can be said that the ST state is after the end of the jackpot A and the jackpot D in which the high probability continues a predetermined number of times.

As shown in FIG. 21-1 (D), the second special symbol jackpot type table used in the feature units 251F to 253F includes the jackpot type A. When a big hit is made by the second special symbol, the big hit A is always decided. In the jackpot type A, the fluctuation based on the game state after the jackpot continues for 100 times of variable display, and the determination rate is 100%. It can be said that the ST state is after the end of the jackpot A in which the high probability continues a predetermined number of times.

(About the flow of various productions from the feature section 251F to the feature section 253F)
FIG. 21-2 is a timing chart showing the flow of various effects. FIG. 21-2 (A) shows the flow of the effect when the jackpot B is obtained in the feature portion 251F. FIG. 21-2 (B) shows the flow of the effect when the jackpot D is obtained in the feature portions 252F and 253F. FIG. 21-2 (C) shows the flow of the effect when the jackpot A or the jackpot C is obtained in the feature portions 251F to 253F.

First, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), when the feature portion 251F changes from the normal state as the low accuracy low base state to the jackpot B, the high accuracy high base continues for a period of 50 times as a specific period. To do. After that, as a predetermined period, 30 times out of 50 times, which is a high accuracy and low base, are set as a period with setting suggestion effect. After that, the remaining 20 times of the high accuracy and low base are set as the period without setting suggestion effect. In the period with the setting suggestion effect, an effect in which a telop indicating that the period is the setting suggestion effect is added on the screen of the image display device 5 is also executed. The display of this telop disappears when the period with setting suggestion effect ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (B), when the feature units 252F and 253F are controlled by the jackpot D and the jackpot D is won again during the high accuracy and low base state after the jackpot, the ending period of the jackpot D The setting suggestion effect is executed at an appearance rate of 80%. As described above, in the feature units 252F and 253F, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by repeatedly executing the jackpot D. The ending period in which the setting suggestion effect may be executed is set as the setting suggestion effect period. After that, if the jackpot D is won in the high accuracy and low base state, the setting suggestion effect is executed at an appearance rate of 90% in the ending period (setting suggestion effect period) after the end of the jackpot D. In this way, the more the jackpot D is repeated, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect. Although the ending period is not shown in the first big hit D, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the first ending period of the big hit D.

Next, a case where the feature units 251F to 253F shown in FIG. 21-2 (C) are controlled to the jackpot A or the jackpot C will be described. When controlled by the jackpot A, the high accuracy high base continues 100 times, and when controlled by the jackpot C, the low accuracy high base continues 100 times. However, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is not defined for any of the big hits, and the setting suggestion effect is not executed even if the state after the end of these big hits or the repeated big hits are won.

(About the setting suggestion effect executed on the feature section 251F)
Next, the setting suggestion effect executed in the feature unit 251F will be described. FIG. 21-3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 21-3 shows how the setting suggestion effect for the jackpot B shown in FIG. 21-2 (A) is executed. As shown in FIG. 21-3 (A), when the high-accuracy high-base state after the end of the jackpot B is executed 20 times, the remaining number of times indicating the remaining number of fluctuations of ST is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5. 251F001 is displayed. The remaining number of times display is decremented by 1 each time the variable display is executed once.

After that, after the variable display 50 times from the end of the jackpot B, the period with the setting suggestion effect is set as shown in FIG. 21-3 (B). In the period with the setting suggestion effect, the remaining number display 251F001 indicating the remaining number of fluctuations of ST is displayed as "remaining 50 times". In addition, a telop image 251F002 in which the characters "setting suggestion chance!" Is displayed is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5. The characters displayed on the telop image 251F002 move from right to left with the passage of time. Further, the character image 251F003 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the character image 251F003 displays the dialogue image 251F005 of "press the button". Further, a button image 251F004 prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed from the center left of the screen.

When the setting suggestion effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (C), when the player operates the push button 31B during the valid period in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, "How about?" The dialogue image 251F006 is displayed. Since the dialogue image 251F006 of "How about?" Is not a display suggesting a set value, the player does not know which set value it is. In addition, instead of displaying characters, symbols such as "x" may be displayed.

Next, even after 77 times of variable display from the end of the jackpot B, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (D), there is a setting suggestion effect period. In the period with the setting suggestion effect, the remaining number display 251F001 indicating the remaining number of fluctuations of ST is displayed as "remaining 23 times". In addition, the telop image 251F in which the characters "setting suggestion chance!" Are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5.
002 is displayed. Further, from the character image 251F003, the dialogue image 251F005 of "press the button" is displayed as in FIG. 21-3 (B). Further, a button image 251F004 prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed from the center left of the screen.

When the setting suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (E), when the player operates the push button 31B during the valid period in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, "high setting expectation is high". The dialogue image 251F007 of "!" Is displayed. The dialogue image 251F007 of "high setting expectation high!" Is a display indicating that the current setting value is likely to be a high setting.

After that, after the period with setting suggestion effect corresponding to 50 to 80 times of variable display ends from the end of jackpot B, the period without setting suggestion effect is set for the remaining 20 times of variable display. FIG. 21-3 (F) shows the 93rd remaining ST number of 7 rotations from the end of the jackpot B. Since the remaining number of rotations is less than 20 rotations, the image related to the setting suggestion effect is not displayed. Regarding the variable display after the 50th rotation when the game state changes from the high accuracy high base to the high accuracy low base, the setting suggestion effect period is set up to the 100th rotation when the high accuracy low base ends. May be good.

FIG. 21-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion effect determination table. The setting suggestion effect determination table is a table used when the jackpot B is won at the rotation speed of 70th rotation or less after the 50th rotation after the end of the jackpot B in the setting suggestion effect determination table. Further, although three tables are provided in FIG. 21-4, different tables are used depending on the number of times the jackpot B is won at the number of rotations 70 or less after the 50th rotation after the end of the jackpot B. ..

FIG. 21-4 (A) is a diagram showing a first setting suggestion effect determination table used when the jackpot B is won once in the high accuracy and low base state after the jackpot B ends. FIG. 21-4 (B) is a diagram showing a second setting suggestion effect determination table used when the jackpot B is subsequently won twice in the high accuracy and low base state after the jackpot B ends. FIG. 21-4 (C) is a diagram showing a third setting suggestion effect determination table used when the jackpot B is subsequently won three or more times in the high accuracy and low base state after the jackpot B ends. Using these tables, the content of the character's dialogue executed in the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the set value is determined. These setting suggestion effect determination tables are stored in ROM 121.

As shown in the first setting suggestion effect determination table in FIG. 21-4 (A), in the first jackpot B, in setting 1, the ratio of "How about?" Is 88%, and "High setting expectation is low! 5%, "High setting expectation medium!" 4%, "High setting expectation high!" 3%, "High setting confirmed!" There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 2, the ratio determined as "How about?" Is 88%, the ratio determined as "High setting expectation is low!" Is 3%, and the ratio determined as "High setting expectation is medium!" Is 5%, the percentage determined as "high setting expectation high!" Is 4%, and the percentage determined as "high setting confirmed!" Is not (0%). In setting 3, the ratio determined as "How about?" Is 87%, the ratio determined as "High setting expectation is low!" Is 3%, and the ratio determined as "High setting expectation medium!" Is 4%, the percentage determined as "high setting expectation high!" Is 5%, and the percentage determined as "high setting confirmed!" Is 1%.

As shown in the second setting suggestion effect determination table in FIG. 21-4 (B), in the second big hit B, in setting 1, the ratio of "How about?" Is 73%, and "High setting expectation is low! The percentage determined as "High setting expectation is high!" Is 10%, the percentage determined as "High setting expectation is medium!" Is 9%, and the percentage determined as "High setting expectation is high!" Is 8%, "High setting confirmed!" There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 2, the percentage determined as "How about?" Is 73%, and "High setting expectation is low!"
The percentage determined to be "High setting expectation is medium!" Is 10%, the percentage determined to "High setting expectation is high!" Is 9%, and "High setting confirmed!" There is no determined percentage (0%). In setting 3, the percentage determined as "How about?" Is 67%, the percentage determined as "High setting expectation is low!" Is 8%, and the percentage determined as "High setting expectation is medium!" Is 9%, the percentage determined as "high setting expectation high!" Is 10%, and the percentage determined as "high setting confirmed!" Is 6%.

As shown in the third setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-4 (C), in the setting 1 at the third or more jackpot B, the ratio of "How about?" Is 58%, and "High setting expectation is low". The percentage determined as "!" Is 15%, the percentage determined as "High setting expectation is medium!" Is 14%, the percentage determined as "High setting expectation is high!" Is 13%, and "High setting confirmed!" There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 2, the ratio determined as "How about?" Is 58%, the ratio determined as "High setting expectation low!" Is 13%, and the ratio determined as "High setting expectation medium!" Is 15%, the percentage determined as "high setting expectation high!" Is 14%, and the percentage determined as "high setting confirmed!" Is not (0%). In setting 3, 47% is determined as "How about?", 13% is determined as "High setting expectation low!", And the ratio determined as "High setting expectation medium!" 14%, the percentage determined as "high setting expectation high!" Is 15%, and the percentage determined as "high setting confirmed!" Is 11%.

By setting the data shown in Fig. 21-4, in the setting suggestion effect processing, the ratio of the dialogue content excluding "High setting confirmed!" Is set to "How about?" Even so, it is the highest, and there are many situations where the set value is not suggested. In addition, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the ratio selected as the content of the dialogue to be executed regardless of the number of jackpots B is "High setting expectation low!"> In the case of setting 1. "High setting expectation is medium!"> "High setting expectation is high!". Further, in the case of setting 2, "high setting expectation is medium!"> "High setting expectation is high!"> "High setting expectation is low!". Further, in the case of setting 3, "high setting expectation is high!"> "High setting expectation is medium!"> "High setting expectation is low!". That is, since the appearance rate of the dialogue differs depending on the setting value, it is possible to suggest the setting value from the content of the dialogue. In addition, since "high setting confirmed!" Appears only in the most advantageous setting 3, the determination rate of "high setting confirmed!" Is the lowest, but when it appears, it is set to the high setting 3. Determine. It should be noted that any character may be displayed at a rate of 100% without being determined by "How about?".

Further, by setting the data shown in FIG. 21-4, in the setting suggestion effect processing, as the number of big hits B increases, the dialogue content suggesting the set value is easily displayed, and the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect increases. In addition, the more times the jackpot B is made, the easier it is to display the line "High setting confirmed!", Which is confirmed to be a high setting. Therefore, it is confirmed that the jackpot B is set to a high setting by continuing multiple times. You can see the production.

Note that FIG. 21-4 is merely an example, and any setting suggestion effect other than the dialogue content that indicates a specific setting value may be executed. For example, characters that hint at set values such as "maybe it feels good" and "lucky!" May be displayed. Further, the set value may be suggested by displaying any one of the plurality of characters.

FIG. 21-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting suggestion effect processing. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the variable display effect process (S172).

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting suggested flag is set (251FS001). When it is determined that the setting suggested flag is not set (N in 251FS001), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to 251FS002.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting suggested flag is set (Y at 251FS001), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

In 251FS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is in a high probability state after the end of the jackpot B. Whether or not it is in a high probability state after the end of the jackpot B is determined based on a command for designating the progress of the game sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is in a high probability state after the end of the jackpot B (Y in 251FS002), it shifts to 251FS003. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is not in the high probability state after the end of the jackpot B (N in 251FS002), the process ends.

In 251FS003, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the number of times stored in the fluctuation number counter that counts the number of variable displays after the end of the jackpot, and whether the value of the fluctuation number counter is more than 50 and 80 or less. Determine if not. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the fluctuation number counter is more than 50 and 80 or less (Y in 251FS003), it shifts to 251FS004. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the fluctuation number counter is 20 or less or more than 50 (N in 251FS003), the process ends.

In 251FS004, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation valid period, which is the period during which the player's pressing motion on the push button 31B can be effectively detected, is in effect. Whether or not the operation is valid can be determined by checking the value of the timer that measures the valid period. When it is determined that the operation valid period is in progress (Y in 251FS004), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to 251FS005. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is not in the operation valid period (N in 251FS004), the process ends.

In 251FS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the action of the player pressing the push button 31B is detected. When it is determined that the operation is detected (Y in 251FS005), the effect control CPU 120 determines the dialogue content in the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion effect determination table according to the number of jackpots B and the set value. Display (251FS006). Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting suggested flag (251FS007), and ends the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation is not detected (N in 251FS005), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

(About the setting suggestion effect executed in the feature section 252F and the feature section 253F)
Next, the setting suggestion effect executed in the feature unit 252F and the feature unit 253F will be described. FIG. 21-6 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 21-6 shows how the setting suggestion effect for the jackpot D shown in FIG. 21-2 (B) is executed. As shown in FIG. 21-6 (A), when the jackpot D is won again during the high-accuracy low-base state after the jackpot D ends (the first jackpot D in the high-accuracy low-base), the image display device 5 is displayed. An effect indicating that the jackpot D has been achieved is executed.

Next, in the ending period of the jackpot D, the setting suggestion effect using the push button 31B is executed. As shown in FIG. 21-6 (B), the button image 252F001 is displayed in the center of the screen in the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 21-6 (C) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 21-6 (C), when a pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is selected or when the push button 31B is not operated, the setting suggestion effect is not executed and "x" is displayed on the screen. The failure image 252F002 indicated by "" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (D), when the jackpot D is won during the high-accuracy low-base state after the jackpot D ends (the second jackpot D in the high-accuracy low-base), the image display device 5 The effect showing that the jackpot D has been achieved is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (E), in the setting suggestion effect, the button image 252F001 is displayed in the center of the screen as in the case of the first jackpot D after the jackpot D. FIG. 21-6 (F) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 21-6 (D), when a pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is executed is selected and the player operates the push button 31B, the character A image 252F003 is displayed on the screen as the setting suggestion effect. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (G), when the jackpot D is won during the high-accuracy low-base state after the jackpot D ends (the third jackpot D in the high-accuracy low-base), the image display device. An effect indicating that the jackpot D has been achieved at 5 is executed. Then, the button image 252F001 is displayed in the center of the screen as in the case of the first and second jackpots D after the jackpot D. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (H), when the pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is executed is selected and the player operates the push button 31B, the character C image 252F004 is displayed on the screen as the setting suggestion effect. Is displayed in.

FIG. 21-7 is a diagram showing a setting suggestion effect determination table. FIG. 21-7 (A) is a jackpot D continuation first setting suggestion effect determination table, FIG. 21-7 (B) is a jackpot D continuation second setting suggestion effect determination table, and FIG. 21-7 (C) is a jackpot D. The third continuation setting suggestion effect decision table is shown. These tables are stored in ROM 121.

The jackpot D continuation first setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-7 (A) shows the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion effect process when the jackpot D is won again in the high accuracy and low base state after the end of the jackpot D. It is a table used for deciding whether or not to execute and which setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) is executed when it is executed. In setting 1, the ratio determined without effect is 20%, the ratio determined by character A is 28%, the ratio determined by character B is 27%, the ratio determined by character C is 25%, and the ratio determined by character D is 25%. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 2, the ratio determined without effect is 20%, the ratio determined for character A is 25%, the ratio determined for character B is 28%, the ratio determined for character C is 27%, and the ratio determined for character D is. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 3, the ratio determined without effect is 20%, the ratio determined for character A is 25%, the ratio determined for character B is 26%, the ratio determined for character C is 27%, and the ratio determined for character D is. The percentage determined to be 2%.

The big hit D continuation second setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-7 (B) shows the setting suggestion effect process when the big hit D is continuously won twice in the high accuracy and low base state after the end of the big hit D. It is a table used for determining whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed, and if so, which setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) is to be executed. In setting 1, the ratio determined without effect is 10%, the ratio determined for character A is 31%, the ratio determined for character B is 30%, the ratio determined for character C is 29%, and the ratio determined for character D is. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 2, the ratio determined without effect is 10%, the ratio determined for character A is 29%, the ratio determined for character B is 31%, the ratio determined for character C is 30%, and the ratio determined for character D is 30%. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 3, the ratio determined without effect is 10%, the ratio determined for character A is 27%, the ratio determined for character B is 28%, the ratio determined for character C is 30%, and the ratio determined for character D is 30%. The rate determined for is 5%.

In FIG. 21-7 (C), the setting suggestion effect determination table for the third or more jackpot D continuation is the setting suggestion effect process when the jackpot D is continuously won three or more times in the high accuracy and low base state after the end of the jackpot D. In this table, it is used to determine whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed, and if so, which setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C, or character D) is to be executed. In setting 1, there is no ratio determined without the effect (0%). Further, the ratio determined by character A is 35%, the ratio determined by character B is 33%, the ratio determined by character C is 32%, and the ratio determined by character D is not (0%). .. In setting 2, there is no ratio (0%) determined without the effect. Further, the ratio determined by character A is 32%, the ratio determined by character B is 35%, the ratio determined by character C is 33%, and the ratio determined by character D is not (0%). .. In setting 3, there is no ratio (0%) determined without the effect. Further, the ratio determined by the character A is 29%, the ratio determined by the character B is 30%, the ratio determined by the character C is 33%, and the ratio determined by the character D is 8%.

FIG. 21-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting suggestion effect processing. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the ending effect process (S177).

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit in a high-accuracy low-base (252FS001). Whether or not it is a big hit in the high accuracy and low base is determined based on the command for specifying the game state. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is a big hit in the high accuracy low base (Y at 252FS001), it shifts to 252FS002. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is not a big hit in the high accuracy low base (N at 252FS001), the process ends.

In 252FS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot D continuation counter is 1. The jackpot D continuation counter is a counter that increases each time the jackpot D is won again in the high accuracy and low base state after the end of the jackpot D. The counter may be reset by winning a jackpot other than the jackpot D. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the jackpot D continuation counter is 1 (Y in 252FS002), the effect of the setting suggestion effect is produced by the jackpot D continuation first setting suggestion effect determination table according to the set value. The content is determined (252FS003), and the process proceeds to 252FS007. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the jackpot D continuation counter is not 1, (N in 252FS002), it shifts to 252FS004.

In 252FS004, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot D continuation counter is 2. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the jackpot D continuation counter is 2 (Y in 252FS004), the effect of the setting suggestion effect is produced by the jackpot D continuation second setting suggestion effect determination table according to the set value. The content is determined (252FS005), and the process proceeds to 252FS007. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the jackpot D continuation counter is not 2 (when it is determined to be 3 or more) (N in 252FS004), the jackpot D continuation counter is set for the third time or more according to the set value. The effect content of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determination table (252FS006), and the process proceeds to 252FS007.

In 252FS007, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (Y in 252FS007), the effect control CPU 120 is set to execute the determined setting suggestion effect (252FS008), and ends the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is not executed (N in 252FS007), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

(About the modified example of the feature part)
Although the feature portions 251F to 253F have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention. A modified example of the feature portions 251F to 253F will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), at the time of jackpot B, 30 high-accuracy low-base periods after the end of 50 high-accuracy high-base states after the end of jackpot B are defined as the period with setting suggestion effect. Was being done. Then, the 20 high-accuracy low-base periods after the end of the 30-time high-accuracy low-base period was a period without setting suggestion effect. However, 20 times of high accuracy and low base period after the end of 30 times of high accuracy and low base period may be set as a period with suggestion effect. Further, the period of 50 times of high accuracy and high base immediately after the end of the jackpot B may be set as the period with suggestion effect. Further, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed during the period of a plurality of variable displays, but may be executed only once.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-5, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed for each variable display during the high accuracy and low base period of 30 times has been described. However, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined predetermined period. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the big hit game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is controlled during the high accuracy and low base period of 30 times. It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect may be executed during the ending period when the jackpot game state is controlled. In such a case, the button image may be displayed during the ending period, and when the movement of the player is detected, the setting suggestion effect may be executed using the table of FIG. 21-4. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during the round, or may be executed during the variable display of the variable display controlled by the jackpot game state.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during the fanfare period, which is a period for notifying that the jackpot is controlled at the start of the jackpot, or during the interval period of the round during the jackpot. Here, if the interval period is lengthened, it is possible to prevent the player from acquiring a large amount of balls in a short period of time, but the player is given a feeling of extension during the production. However, even if the interval period is lengthened, the feeling of delay can be reduced by executing the setting suggestion effect during the interval period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered during the interval period, and to prevent the shooting property from becoming too high by acquiring a large amount of balls in a short time.

In the present embodiment, during the high accuracy and high base, the game according to the second special figure is mainly digested, and the second special figure is preferentially digested over the first special figure. In such a case, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during a predetermined period during which the variable display of the second special figure (for example, the variable display for four times) held when the high base ends is executed. .. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during a predetermined period such as 30 rotations (4 rotations for the number of reservations + 26 rotations for the high accuracy low base) including the number of rotations of the second special figure, or the number of rotations for the number of reservations. The mode of the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the period (the period of 4 rotations for the number of reservations) and the other period (the period of 26 rotations of the high accuracy and low base). It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect may be executed even when there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit in the hold when the high base ends. In such a case, the setting suggestion effect executed in the variable display for the number of reserved numbers of the second special figure during the predetermined period and the setting suggestion executed in the variable display of the first special figure in the high accuracy and low base state. A setting suggestion effect of a mode different from that of the effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), the setting suggestion effect is during the variable display of the high accuracy low base period of 30 times after the end of the high accuracy high base state of 50 times after the end of the jackpot B. The case where it is executed was explained. However, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during the customer waiting demo effect instead of the variable display. When it is executed during the demonstration effect as described above, the setting suggestion effect may be executed as one of the mini games by operating a predetermined operation means such as the push button 31B. Further, when it is executed during the demo production, the setting suggestion may be executed according to the content of the moving image during the demo production. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the period in which the start winning is not executed continues for a predetermined period even though the game ball is fired. For example, if the start winning is not generated when one minute has passed from the detection of the launch of the game ball by the sensor that detects the launch of the game ball, the setting suggestion may be executed. In this way, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a period other than the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 21-3, the case where the telop image 251F002 is displayed at the lower part of the screen during the period with the setting suggestion effect has been described. However, the background may be switched during the period with the setting suggestion effect. Further, the period with the setting suggestion effect may be a combination of the background switching and the telop image 251F002.

In the period with the setting suggestion effect, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate immediately after the start of the period with the setting suggestion effect than just before the end of the period with the setting suggestion effect. Further, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect may be different instead of the execution ratio being different.

After the end of the jackpot B, the setting suggestion effect became the jackpot B again in the 30 high-accuracy low-base period after the end of the 50-time high-accuracy high-base state without shifting to the jackpot A that is advantageous to the player. In that case, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than that of the first time. In this way, even if the unfavorable big hit continues, the player's disappointment can be reduced by the setting suggestion effect. Further, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be increased as the number of times that the disadvantageous big hit continues increases.

As shown in FIG. 21-5, the case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed when the movement of the player is not detected has been described. However, the setting suggestion effect may be executed even when the movement of the player is not detected. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed after the operation valid period has elapsed. In such a case, a setting suggestion effect having a lower reliability than when the player's movement is detected may be executed.

The setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 21-3 may have different execution ratios depending on whether or not the variable display is a big hit. For example, in the case of a variable display that is a big hit, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than that of the variable display that is an outlier. In addition, a setting suggestion effect may be provided in which the execution ratio does not differ regardless of whether it is a big hit or not.

In the invention relating to the feature unit 251F, it has been described that the setting suggestion effect is executed when the jackpot B, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot A, continues. After the end of the jackpot B, if the jackpot B is won again in the high accuracy high base state, the most advantageous high accuracy high base state 100 times will be given, but the jackpot B will be won again in the high accuracy low base state. In that case, the high accuracy and high base state is only given 50 times. However, since the setting suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even if it is a disadvantageous big hit. It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect period may be provided after the end of the jackpot when the jackpot C, which is the most disadvantageous for the player, is won.

As shown in FIG. 21-2 (B), in the feature unit 252F, a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed by continuing the jackpot D, which is disadvantageous for the player, a plurality of times has been described. However, regardless of the type of jackpot, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by continuing the jackpot within a predetermined period. Specifically, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the condition that one of the big hits is won during 100 fluctuations different from the normal state after the end of the big hit. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the same type or different types of big hits continue. In addition, the execution rate and reliability of the setting suggestion effect may differ depending on the type of jackpot.

In the feature unit 252F and the feature unit 253F, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a period other than the ending period of the jackpot. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during the round, or may be executed during the variable display of the variable display controlled by the jackpot game state.

In FIG. 21-7, when the jackpot D was continued three times or more, no effect was not selected. However, even if the jackpot D continues a plurality of times, no effect may be selected at a low rate. In addition, there may be an effect that is executed at the same ratio regardless of the number of jackpots D.

The setting suggestion effect may be executed for the jackpot C shown in FIG. 21-1. In such a case, there may be a setting suggestion effect of the content to be executed at a constant rate regardless of the state. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed for the jackpot C, it is desirable that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than that of the jackpot D.

The jackpot D shown in FIG. 21-1 is a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player because it is in a high-accuracy and low-base state after the jackpot is completed, so that a starting prize is unlikely to occur. However, even if the big hits that the player feels disadvantageous are continuous, the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that it is possible to expect to win the big hit D next time. It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the jackpot D is first won.

The case where the character is displayed as the setting suggestion effect has been described. However, the setting suggestion effect may be shown by changing the background color. In such a case, the background image for confirming the high setting may be displayed based on the fact that the jackpot is disadvantageous multiple times at the time of the high setting.

The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 transmits information regarding the set value as shown in step 112IWS031 of FIG. 20-9, step 112IWS108 of FIG. 20-13, and the like. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect process based on the information regarding the set value. In such a case, if the setting value command is not normal as the information regarding the setting value, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous set value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed. In addition, without making a tentative decision (temporary setting) to execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting, only the pattern of confirming the high setting is not executed, and the setting suggestion effect selected by lottery is executed. It may be done. Further, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

The controls in the feature unit may be applied in combination with each other. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the effect related to the setting suggestion.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 251F)
As described above, the feature section 251F includes the inventions shown below with respect to the feature section 251F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was. In such a pachinko machine, one of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the change of the set value, and the suggestion of the set value is executed. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). Further, there is a gaming machine in which when it is controlled to an advantageous state in a specific period, it is controlled to a more advantageous state than when it is controlled to an advantageous state outside the specific period (see, for example, JP-A-2002-66021). ..

However, when executing an effect suggesting a setting as in JP 2010-200902 on a gaming machine such as JP2002-66021, there is room for improvement in the execution trigger of the effect suggesting the setting. It was. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 251F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process).
When the advantageous state is controlled within a specific period (for example, a period of 50 high-accuracy high bases after the end of the jackpot B), the high-accuracy high base 50 times after the end of the jackpot B is outside the specific period (for example, 50 high-accuracy high bases after the end of the jackpot B). Special state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, 100 times of high accuracy and high base) which is advantageous to the player at a higher rate than when controlled to the advantageous state in the period of high accuracy and low base after the end. (For example, CPU103)
It is provided with a setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-3) that suggests a set value to the player.
The setting suggestion effect executing means is described in the predetermined period after the end of the specific period (for example, the period with the setting suggestion effect of 30 times of the high accuracy low base after the end of the high accuracy high base 50 times after the end of the jackpot B). It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect.

According to such a configuration, since the setting suggestion effect is executed in a predetermined period after the end of the specific period, it is possible to pay attention to the execution trigger of the effect suggesting the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process),
When the advantageous state is controlled within a specific period (for example, a period of 50 high accuracy bases after the end of the jackpot B), the high accuracy base 50 times after the end of the jackpot B is outside the specific period (for example, 50 high accuracy bases after the end of the jackpot B). Special state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, 100 times of high accuracy and high base) which is advantageous to the player at a higher rate than when controlled to the advantageous state in the period of high accuracy and low base after the end. (For example, CPU103)
It is provided with a setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-3) that suggests a set value to the player.
The setting suggestion effect executing means is described in the predetermined period after the end of the specific period (for example, the period with the setting suggestion effect of 30 times of the high accuracy low base after the end of the high accuracy high base 50 times after the end of the jackpot B). The setting suggestion effect can be executed when it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed when it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state during the period with the setting suggestion effect).

According to such a configuration, since the setting suggestion effect is executed when the setting suggestion effect is controlled in a predetermined period after the end of the specific period, it is possible to pay attention to the execution trigger of the effect suggesting the setting, and the game. The interest of is improved.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The specific period is a period after the end of the advantageous state (for example, the specific period is a period of 50 times of high accuracy and high base after the end of the jackpot B).

According to such a configuration, a specific period starts after the advantageous state ends, so that the interest is improved.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
The predetermined period is a period in which the variable display is executed at least a plurality of times (for example, the predetermined period is a setting suggestion effect of 30 high-accuracy low-bases after 50 high-accuracy high-bases after the end of the jackpot B). There is a period).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment even if the advantageous state is not controlled during a specific period.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
Further provided with a predetermined period notification effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined period notification effect (for example, an effect of displaying the telop image 251F002) for notifying the player that the predetermined period is reached. ..

According to such a configuration, it can be easily understood that the period is a predetermined period.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
After being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) in the predetermined period (for example, the period with setting suggestion effect), the predetermined period is again performed without shifting to the special state (for example, the high accuracy and high base state). When the player is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state), the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is high (for example, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is high when the number of times the unfavorable jackpot is won is large). Become).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player who has not been repeatedly controlled to the advantageous state during the specific period.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
Further equipped with an operation means (for example, push button 31B) that can be operated by the player,
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B).

According to such a configuration, the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 20-9, FIG. 20-13. Step 112 IWS108) and
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the set value information output from the set value information output means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 21-3).
When the set value information output from the set value information output means is not normal, the setting suggestion effect executing means sets a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect (for example, when the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect as if it is set to a low setting value. It is possible).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous set value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 252F)
As described above, the feature portion 252F includes the inventions shown below with respect to the feature portion 252F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was. In such a pachinko machine, one of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the change of the set value, and the suggestion of the set value is executed. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). In addition, there is a gaming machine in which a so-called latent probability change state, which is a high probability and low base state, is repeated (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-78670).

However, when an effect suggesting a setting as in JP 2010-200902 is executed on a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-78670, there is room for improvement in the execution trigger of the effect suggesting the setting. It was. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 252F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process).
It is provided with a setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-6) that suggests the set value to the player.
The setting suggestion effect executing means is repeatedly controlled to the advantageous state (for example, jackpot D) within a predetermined period (for example, within a period of 100 high-accuracy low bases after the jackpot D ends). Suggestive effects can be performed.

According to such a configuration, since the setting suggestion effect is executed by being repeatedly controlled to the advantageous state within a predetermined period, it is possible to pay attention to the execution trigger of the effect suggesting the setting, and the interest of the game is improved. To do.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
The predetermined period is a period after the end of the advantageous state (for example, the predetermined period is a period of 100 times of high accuracy and low base after the end of the jackpot D).

According to such a configuration, a predetermined period starts after the advantageous state ends, so that the interest is improved.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The setting suggestion effect is an effect executed at the end of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-6, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot).

According to such a configuration, attention can be paid at the end of the advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot D) which is more disadvantageous than the first advantageous state.
The setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect based on being repeatedly controlled to the second advantageous state within the predetermined period (for example, 100 times of high accuracy and low base after the end of the jackpot D). It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the fact that the jackpot D is repeatedly controlled during the period of.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment when the unfavorable advantageous state is repeated.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
The predetermined period is a period in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal state, and the execution frequency of the variable display is controlled to the specific state (for example, high accuracy and low base state) which is the same as the normal state. There is, and the specific state is repeated based on the fact that the second advantageous state is repeatedly controlled within the predetermined period (for example, the high probability and low base 100 times after the end of the big hit D is repeatedly controlled to the big hit D. Based on that, the high-probability and low-base state is repeated).

According to such a configuration, since the setting suggestion effect is executed even if the specific state is repeated, it is possible to further reduce the player's disappointment.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
The greater the number of times the second advantageous state is repeatedly controlled, the higher the reliability of the setting suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-7, the greater the number of times the jackpot is controlled, the higher the reliability. The setting suggestion effect is determined using a high table).

According to such a configuration, even if the second advantageous state is repeated, the setting suggestion effect with high reliability is executed, so that the player's further disappointment can be reduced.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
Further equipped with an operation means (for example, push button 31B) that can be operated by the player,
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B).

According to such a configuration, the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 20-9, FIG. 20-13. Step 112 IWS108) and
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the set value information output from the set value information output means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 21-6).
When the set value information output from the set value information output means is not normal, the setting suggestion effect executing means sets a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect (for example, when the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect as if it is set to a low setting value. It is possible).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous set value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 253F)
As described above, the feature portion 253F includes the inventions shown below with respect to the feature portion 253F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was. In such a pachinko machine, one of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the change of the set value, and the suggestion of the set value is executed. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). In addition, there is a gaming machine in which a so-called latent probability change state, which is a high probability and low base state, is repeated (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-78670).

However, when an effect suggesting a setting as in JP 2010-200902 is executed on a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-78670, there is room for improvement in the execution trigger of the effect suggesting the setting. It was. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 253F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process).
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a high probability state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal state,
It is provided with a setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-6) that suggests the set value to the player.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot D) which is more disadvantageous than the first advantageous state.
The ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs between when the first advantageous state is controlled and when the second advantageous state is controlled (for example, in the jackpot A, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, but the jackpot D Then, the setting suggestion effect may be executed).

According to such a configuration, since the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the type of the advantageous state, it is possible to pay attention to the execution trigger of the effect suggesting the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
The setting suggestion effect is an effect executed at the end of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-6, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot).

According to such a configuration, attention can be paid at the end of the advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect based on the fact that the second advantageous state is repeatedly controlled within a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state (for example, after the end of the jackpot D). It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the fact that the jackpot D is repeatedly controlled during the period of 100 times of high accuracy and low base).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment when the disadvantageous second advantageous state is repeated.

(4) In the game machine of (3) above
The predetermined period is a period in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal state, and the execution frequency of the variable display is controlled to the specific state (for example, high accuracy and low base state) which is the same as the normal state. Yes, the specific state is repeated based on the fact that the second advantageous state is repeatedly controlled within the predetermined period (for example, the jackpot D is repeatedly controlled during a period of 100 high-probability and low bases after the end of the jackpot D). It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect based on that).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment when the disadvantageous second advantageous state is repeated.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
The greater the number of times the second advantageous state is repeatedly controlled, the higher the reliability of the setting suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-7, the greater the number of times the jackpot is controlled, the higher the reliability. The setting suggestion effect is determined using a high table).

According to such a configuration, even if the second advantageous state is repeated, the setting suggestion effect with high reliability is executed, so that the player's further disappointment can be reduced.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
Further equipped with an operation means (for example, push button 31B) that can be operated by the player,
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B).

According to such a configuration, the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 20-9, FIG. 20-13. Step 112 IWS108) and
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the set value information output from the set value information output means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 21-6).
When the set value information output from the set value information output means is not normal, the setting suggestion effect executing means sets a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect (for example, when the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect as if it is set to a low setting value. It is possible).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous set value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 4A, 4B special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 6A winning ball device, 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker , 9 Game effect lamp, 10 General winning openings, 11 Main board, 12
Production control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay board, 20 normal symbol display, 21 gate switch, 22A, 22B start port switch, 23 count switch, 30 ball hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push Button, 32 movable body, 100 game control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104,124 random number circuit, 105,125 I / O, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of multiple stages having different advantages for the player, and
It is provided with a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value to the player.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous than the first advantageous state.
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
As the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, which makes it easier to specify the set value than the first setting suggestion effect.
Ri executable der the second set indicated effect at a different rate as when controlled by the second advantageous as when controlled in the first preferred state,
The second setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate when the second advantageous state is continuous for the second number of times than when the second advantageous state is continuous for the first number of times.
A game machine characterized by that.

Images